diff options
| author | Kurt Zenker <kz@openoffice.org> | 2009-09-11 17:55:45 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Kurt Zenker <kz@openoffice.org> | 2009-09-11 17:55:45 +0000 |
| commit | f8050a8d1ab674e1089d28ff5a6378126b68db2d (patch) | |
| tree | 05c0c21634a060aaa2f9e3d216298c9b99636271 /helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide | |
| parent | 21c07ae6febccb6fab0d58c7d5bbf9628a06f4db (diff) | |
CWS-TOOLING: integrate CWS hcshared23
2009-09-09 15:34:15 +0200 ufi r275999 : again
2009-09-08 16:41:34 +0200 ufi r275941 : vor bauen
2009-09-08 16:35:18 +0200 ufi r275940 : vor bauen
2009-09-07 11:12:35 +0200 ufi r275878 : test
Diffstat (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide')
112 files changed, 526 insertions, 523 deletions
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp index cf49dee4d7..6d10bcb750 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152830" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect Options</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab, and then select “Apply numbering – symbol”.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152867" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - AutoCorrect</item>, and ensure that <item type="menuitem">While Typing</item> is selected.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152867" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Choose <emph>Format - AutoCorrect</emph>, and ensure that <emph>While Typing</emph> is selected.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2357860" role="tip" l10n="NEW">The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style.</paragraph> @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ oldref="21">To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147773" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Type <item type="literal">1.</item>, <item type="literal">i.</item>, or <item type="literal">I.</item> to start a numbered list. Type <item type="literal">*</item> or <item type="literal">-</item> to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, <item type="literal">1)</item> or <item type="literal">i)</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147773" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i).</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147794" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp index fcc194e0ac..f46ea279bf 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10846" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu <item type="menuitem">Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10846" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu <emph>Format - AutoCorrect - While Typing</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147251" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147274" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="14">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect Options</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145596" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">Click the <item type="menuitem">Replace</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145596" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">Click the <emph>Replace</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">In the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list, select the word pair that you want to remove.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145645" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click <item type="menuitem">Delete</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145645" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145668" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="4">To Stop Replacing Quotation Marks</paragraph> @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151196" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="6">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect Options</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151220" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click the <item type="menuitem">Custom Quotes</item> tab</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151220" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click the <emph>Custom Quotes</emph> tab</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151245" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Clear the “Replace” check box(es).</paragraph> @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155099" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="10">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools – AutoCorrect Options</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155123" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155123" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155148" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Clear the “Capitalize first letter of every sentence<emph>”</emph> check box.</paragraph> @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155439" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="19">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect Options</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155463" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155463" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155488" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Clear the “Apply border<emph>”</emph> check box.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp index ad87e71b06..0e7964dc6c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -54,14 +54,14 @@ oldref="41">To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155531" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="42">Activate the <item type="menuitem">AutoSpellcheck</item> icon on the Standard bar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155531" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="42">Activate the <emph>AutoSpellcheck </emph>icon on the Standard bar.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155569" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the <item type="menuitem">AutoCorrect</item> submenu.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155569" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the <emph>AutoCorrect </emph>submenu.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147759" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="6">If you choose a word from the <item type="menuitem">AutoCorrect</item> submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose <item type="menuitem">Tools – AutoCorrect Options</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Replace</item> tab.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147819" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="7">You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing <item type="menuitem">Add</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147819" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="7">You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing <emph>Add</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147220" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="32">To Exclude Words From the Spellcheck</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp index d4aae67c09..2e4e173bb3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -49,15 +49,15 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3152887" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="10"><variable id="autocorr_except"><link href="text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp" name="Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List">Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List</link> </variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154254" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="11">You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154254" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="11">You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. </paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155576" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect Options</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Exceptions</item> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147762" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Do one of the following:</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147786" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the <item type="menuitem">Abbreviations (no subsequent capital)</item> box and click <item type="menuitem">New</item>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147812" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Type the word in the <item type="menuitem">Words with TWo INitial CApitals</item> box and click <item type="menuitem">New</item>. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147786" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the <emph>Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) </emph>box and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147812" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Type the word in the <emph>Words with TWo INitial CApitals </emph>box and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3144875" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="17">To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp index bc5aded4aa..7396910600 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -67,13 +67,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147761" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="58">Select the category where you want to store the AutoText.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147779" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="59">Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the <item type="menuitem">Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing</item> AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147779" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="59">Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the <emph>Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing</emph> AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147807" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="60">Click the <item type="menuitem">AutoText</item> button, and then choose <item type="menuitem">New</item>. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147807" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="60">Click the <emph>AutoText</emph> button, and then choose <emph>New</emph>. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10732" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <item type="menuitem">Close</item> button.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10732" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Close</emph> button.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147282" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145597" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="61">Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145615" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText"><item type="menuitem">Edit - AutoText</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145615" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText"><emph>Edit - AutoText</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145644" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click<emph/> @@ -97,16 +97,16 @@ oldref="45">To Print a List of AutoText Entries</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="44">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155160" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="62">In the <item type="menuitem">Macro from</item> list, double-click "%PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks".</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155160" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="62">In the <emph>Macro from</emph> list, double-click "%PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks".</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151277" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="63">Select "AutoText" and then click <item type="menuitem">Run</item>. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151277" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="63">Select "AutoText" and then click <emph>Run</emph>. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151304" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Print</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151304" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151327" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp index 76ec5ec3c7..c3e1ae9da7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ <bookmark_value>tables; backgrounds</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>cells; backgrounds</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>MW transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/background.xhp and added 3 new entries</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149346" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="background"><link href="text/swriter/guide/background.xhp" name="Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics">Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics</link> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149346" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="background"><link href="text/swriter/guide/background.xhp" name="Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics">Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics</link> </variable></paragraph><comment>MW built this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7355265" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147653" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="3">To Apply a Background To Text Characters</paragraph> @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150669" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Select the characters.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155390" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Character</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155390" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Format - Character</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153665" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click the <item type="menuitem">Background</item> tab, select the background color.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153665" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click the <emph>Background</emph> tab, select the background color.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153541" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="7">To Apply a Background To a Paragraph</paragraph> @@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145119" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3158430" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3158430" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Format - Paragraph</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151245" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">On the <item type="menuitem">Background</item> tab page, select the background color or a background graphic.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151245" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">On the <emph>Background</emph> tab page, select the background color or a background graphic.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149294" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -82,19 +82,19 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154346" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Place the cursor in the table in your text document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148664" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="13">Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Table Properties</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148664" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="13">Choose <emph>Table - Table Properties</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154938" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <item type="menuitem">Background</item> tab page, select the background color or a background graphic.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154938" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <emph>Background</emph> tab page, select the background color or a background graphic.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156280" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">In the <item type="menuitem">For</item> box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156280" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">In the <emph>For</emph> box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151041" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="31">You may also use an icon to apply a background to table parts.</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150767" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="32">To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the <item type="menuitem">Background Color</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150767" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="32">To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the <emph>Background Color</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147084" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="33">To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the <item type="menuitem">Background Color</item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp index eaf714494c..c03db769a6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155388" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Select the object for which you want to define a border.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149578" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="4">Click the <item type="menuitem">Borders</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">OLE-Object</item> toolbar or <item type="menuitem">Frame</item> toolbar to open the <item type="menuitem">Borders</item> window. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149578" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="4">Click the <emph>Borders</emph> icon on the <emph>OLE-Object</emph> toolbar or <emph>Frame</emph> toolbar to open the <emph>Borders</emph> window. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159176" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style.</paragraph> @@ -74,19 +74,19 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156344" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - (object name) – Borders</item>.<br/>Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148797" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">In the <item type="menuitem">User-defined</item> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148797" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">In the <emph>User-defined</emph> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152933" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the <item type="menuitem">Line</item> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152933" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3125865" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Repeat the last two steps for every border edge.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150447" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <item type="menuitem">Spacing to Contents</item> area.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150447" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <emph>Spacing to Contents</emph> area.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154908" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item> to apply the changes.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154908" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp index 8cc62c0e03..c43a6440f1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp @@ -47,46 +47,46 @@ <bookmark_value>defining;page borders</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>MW deleted "adding;"</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156136" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="15"><variable id="border_page"><link href="text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp" name="Defining Borders for Pages">Defining Borders for Pages</link> + oldref="15"><variable id="border_page"><link href="text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp" name="Defining Borders for Pages">Defining Borders for Pages</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148473" role="warning" l10n="CHG" oldref="1">In Writer, you define borders for <emph>page styles</emph>, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename].</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150503" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="2">To Set a Predefined Border Style</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148491" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page - Borders</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148491" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <emph>Format - Page - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150771" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Select one of the default border styles in the <item type="menuitem">Default</item> area.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150771" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Select one of the default border styles in the <emph>Default</emph> area.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154046" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the <item type="menuitem">Line</item> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154046" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152472" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <item type="menuitem">Spacing to contents</item> area.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152472" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <emph>Spacing to contents</emph> area.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156023" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item> to apply the changes.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156023" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145068" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To Set a Customized Border Style</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148663" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page - Borders</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148663" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Format - Page - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150541" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">In the <item type="menuitem">User-defined</item> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150541" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">In the <emph>User-defined</emph> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159149" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the <item type="menuitem">Line</item> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159149" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156282" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Repeat the last two steps for every border edge.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151041" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <item type="menuitem">Spacing to contents</item> area.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151041" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <emph>Spacing to contents</emph> area.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145606" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item> to apply the changes.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145606" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp index 5bfb7d60d7..4c592d7152 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp @@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6129947" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Table properties</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8141117" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">In the dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Borders</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8141117" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">In the dialog, click the <emph>Borders</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6016418" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose the border options you want to apply and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6016418" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5282448" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">The options in the <item type="menuitem">Line arrangement</item> area can be used to apply multiple border styles.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5282448" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">The options in the <emph>Line arrangement</emph> area can be used to apply multiple border styles.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3547166" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">Selection of cells</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1108432" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different.</paragraph> <table id="tbl_id4423352"> @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ </table> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5044099" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">Default settings</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id626544" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Click one of the <item type="menuitem">Default</item> icons to set or reset multiple borders.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id626544" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Click one of the <emph>Default</emph> icons to set or reset multiple borders.</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id292062" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared.</paragraph> @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id7144993" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">Examples</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5528427" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Cells - Borders</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5528427" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose <emph>Format - Cells - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4194158" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> <image id="img_id8221076" src="res/helpimg/border_ca_5.png" width="1.2209in" height="0.2445in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id8221076">default icons for borders</alt> </image></paragraph> @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5273293" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5110019" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">User defined settings</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1820734" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">User defined</item> area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1820734" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>User defined</emph> area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7093111" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states.</paragraph> <table id="tbl_id5196996"> <tablerow> @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5908688" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">Examples</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5118564" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Table properties - Borders</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5118564" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose <emph>Table - Table properties - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id244758" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Select a thick line style.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp index b073827dd5..55aaf12f33 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155565" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="11">You can also click the <item type="menuitem">Formula</item> <emph/>icon on the <item type="menuitem">Formula Bar</item>, and then choose a function for your formula.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8316904" role="note" l10n="NEW">To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter <item type="literal">=<A1></item> into the cell.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8316904" role="note" l10n="NEW">To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp index f0f49ed9a0..49a1a42c0a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp @@ -48,13 +48,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147692" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="35"><variable id="calculate_clipboard"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp" name=" Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document"> Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document</link> </variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156366" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="36">If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the Formula Bar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156366" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="36">If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the <emph>Formula Bar</emph>.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154250" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155496" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Calculate</item>, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155496" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">Choose <emph>Tools - Calculate</emph>, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Plus Sign (+).</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp index fbf0531e6e..bca54eea2e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ </variable></paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154243" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Table</item>, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154243" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Insert - Table</emph>, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154203" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty.</paragraph> @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147775" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.<br/>$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150507" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Press Enter, or click <item type="menuitem">Apply</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Formula bar</item>. <br/>The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150507" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Press Enter, or click <emph>Apply</emph> in the Formula bar. <br/>The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150533" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="10">If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp index c3a6e0b33c..989321140d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149692" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|).</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149481" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149481" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Press <emph>Enter</emph>. The result is inserted as a field into the document.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149823" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="35">To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp index 1f07d04bd4..333ad1ebef 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155577" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155598" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Press Enter.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155598" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Press <emph>Enter</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147776" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="51">If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp index e3fb1fbe77..9632e90ef1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147254" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147274" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Press Enter.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147274" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Press <emph>Enter</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp index 73d2ef1cc1..f92e4a12a3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155567" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Select the item that you want to add a caption to.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155586" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Caption</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155586" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147765" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Select the options that you want, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>. If you want, you can also enter different text in the <item type="menuitem">Category</item> @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147254" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can edit caption text directly in the document.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147271" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="28">A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145671" role="tip" l10n="CHG" oldref="45">$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145671" role="tip" l10n="CHG" oldref="45">$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</emph>.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp#captions_numbers"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp index f394db1d2e..3b983a9cd8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ <bookmark_value>inserting;chapter numbers in captions</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;"</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147684" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="14"><variable id="captions_numbers"><link href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp" name="Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions">Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions</link> + oldref="14"><variable id="captions_numbers"><link href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp" name="Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions">Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147395" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="15">You can include chapter numbers in captions.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147408" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="16">Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles.</paragraph> @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154249" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select the item that you want to add a caption to.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150503" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Caption</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150503" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150527" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select a caption title from the <item type="menuitem">Category</item> @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ <emph/>box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153166" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click <item type="menuitem">Options</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153166" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click <emph>Options</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153190" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">In the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> @@ -78,10 +78,10 @@ <item type="menuitem">Separator</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155586" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <item type="menuitem">Caption</item> dialog, click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155586" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <emph>Caption</emph> dialog, click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147226" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="43">$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147226" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="43">$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</emph>.</paragraph> <section id="relatedtopics"> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145567" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG"><link href="text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp" name="Caption dialog">AutoCaption dialog</link></paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp index a0e73b7f4d..0c5b16b470 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp @@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154245" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="24">For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150503" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Open a new text document, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150503" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Open a new text document, choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and then click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150532" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="27">Click the <item type="menuitem">New Style from Selection</item> icon and select <item type="menuitem">New Styles from Selection</item> from the submenu.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150532" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="27">Click the <emph>New Style from Selection</emph> icon and select <emph>New Styles from Selection</emph> from the submenu.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Type a name for the page in the <item type="menuitem">Style name</item> @@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153184" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155541" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header</item>, and choose the new page style from the list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155541" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>Insert - Header</emph>, and choose the new page style from the list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155572" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155592" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155592" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147771" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp index aae7059d74..f475c6d16d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D5" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D9" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Press the Backspace key to delete the number.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D9" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Press the <item type="keycode">Backspace</item> key to delete the number.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155552" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -85,14 +85,14 @@ <emph/>tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147758" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Select the custom style in the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Style</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147758" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Select the custom style in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147782" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the<emph/> <item type="menuitem">Level</item> list. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147808" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147808" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp index dec3f49b46..6490e94495 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -95,10 +95,10 @@ </list> <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150446" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the <item type="menuitem">Then</item> box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150446" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the <emph>Then</emph> box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150473" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150473" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155073" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155086" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="67">In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Fields</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="68">Replace the number in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp index 394121272b..b9d058471c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145305" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Type <item type="literal">Page</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Else</item> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155535" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155535" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp index e7148912da..fc16d93155 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -50,14 +50,14 @@ </variable></paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Choose <emph>Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151391" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the <item type="menuitem">User-defined</item> <emph/>list, and then click <item type="menuitem">Edit</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select the word that you want to delete in the <item type="menuitem">Word</item> list, and then click <item type="menuitem">Delete</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select the word that you want to delete in the <emph>Word</emph> list, and then click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp index 9d30a9a299..d44a7e685e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ </image></paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147126" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147126" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph> at the bottom of the workplace.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> </table> @@ -74,22 +74,22 @@ <emph/>icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153179" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153179" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145267" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select "Right Page" in the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145267" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select "Right Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145299" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145299" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155529" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Select "Left Page" in the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155529" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Select "Left Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155561" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the <item type="menuitem">Styles and Formatting window</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155561" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155588" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="19">To add a header to one of the page styles, choose<emph/> @@ -101,10 +101,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3394573" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7594225" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7594225" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8147221" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Remove the check mark from <item type="menuitem">Print automatically inserted blank pages</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8147221" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Remove the check mark from <emph>Print automatically inserted blank pages</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp index a412feb673..30983a7edd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp @@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155608" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Select the field and choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Cut</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155608" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Select the field and choose <emph>Edit - Cut</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154238" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Paste Special</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154238" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Edit - Paste Special</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154262" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Click "Unformatted text" in the<emph/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp index 59cd127aa3..a1bcdfbadc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -53,8 +53,8 @@ </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154246" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="4">Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154262" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="5">Viewing Fields</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150509" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="6">Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp" name="View - Fields"><item type="menuitem">View - Field Names</item></link>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150536" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="195">To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose <item type="menuitem">View - Field Shadings</item>. To permanently disable this feature, choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance</item>, and clear the check box in front of <item type="menuitem">Field shadings</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150509" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="6">Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp" name="View - Fields"><emph>View - Field Names</emph></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150536" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="195">To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose <emph>View - Field Shadings</emph>. To permanently disable this feature, choose <emph>Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance</emph>, and clear the check box in front of <emph>Field shadings</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152885" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="7">To change the color of field shadings, choose <link href="text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp" name="Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance"><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance</item></link>, locate the <item type="menuitem">Field shadings</item> option, and then select a different color in the <item type="menuitem">Color setting</item> <emph/>box.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153166" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">Field Properties</paragraph> @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151244" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="10">Placeholder, hidden text, insert reference, variable, database, and user-defined fields display a help tip when you rest the mouse pointer over the field in a document. To enable this feature, ensure that the Extended Tips<emph/>option (<item type="menuitem">What's This?</item>) is selected in the <item type="menuitem">Help</item> menu.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155937" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="11">Updating Fields</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155963" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="12">To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Select All</item>, and then press F9.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155963" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="12">To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose <emph>Edit - Select All</emph>, and then press F9.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155984" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="13">To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp index 69df26b4a2..b50331c86a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154491" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147679" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Other</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Document</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147679" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Other</emph> and click the <emph>Document</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153415" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Click “Date” in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp index 8c19afc6cb..ecdf29c63f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ <bookmark_value>input fields in text</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>inserting;input fields</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>MW deleted "adding;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155916" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="fields_enter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp" name="Adding Input Fields">Adding Input Fields</link> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155916" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="fields_enter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp" name="Adding Input Fields">Adding Input Fields</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153409" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ <emph/>and type the text for the variable.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155888" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155888" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150708" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="4">To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press Ctrl+Shift+F9.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp index f846f8803c..3efa954c88 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp @@ -85,17 +85,17 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153190" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="102">Select the text in the document that you want to hide.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145273" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="103">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145273" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="103">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145297" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="104">In the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> <emph/>area, select the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> check box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155533" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="105">In the <item type="menuitem">With Condition</item> box, type <item type="literal">user_lastname == "Doe"</item>, where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155533" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="105">In the <emph>With Condition</emph> box, type <emph>user_lastname == "Doe"</emph>, where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155573" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="107">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and then save the document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155573" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="107">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then save the document.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147760" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="108">The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp index e4e8c6f735..fa128de2a8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp @@ -61,16 +61,16 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3158970" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">To Find Text</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6957304" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Find & Replace</item> to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6957304" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Edit - Find & Replace</emph> to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2164677" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Enter the text to find in the <item type="menuitem">Search for</item> text box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2164677" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Enter the text to find in the <emph>Search for</emph> text box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5684072" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Either click <item type="menuitem">Find</item> or <item type="menuitem">Find All</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5684072" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Either click <emph>Find</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4377269" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you click <item type="menuitem">Find</item>, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click <item type="menuitem">Find</item> again to advance to the next found text. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4377269" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you click <emph>Find</emph>, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click <emph>Find</emph> again to advance to the next found text. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1371807" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id924100" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9359416" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you click <item type="menuitem">Find All</item>, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once.</paragraph> @@ -78,34 +78,34 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1780755" role="note" l10n="NEW">Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2467421" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Find & Replace</item> to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2467421" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4286935" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Enter the text to search in the <item type="menuitem">Search for</item> text box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4286935" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Enter the text to search in the <emph>Search for </emph>text box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9959410" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Enter the text to replace the found text in the <item type="menuitem">Replace with</item> text box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9959410" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Enter the text to replace the found text in the <emph>Replace with</emph> text box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id24109" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Either click <item type="menuitem">Replace</item> or <item type="menuitem">Replace All</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id24109" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Either click <emph>Replace</emph> or <emph>Replace All</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id703451" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you click <item type="menuitem">Replace</item>, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the <item type="menuitem">Search for</item> box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click <item type="menuitem">Replace</item> to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the <item type="menuitem">Replace with</item> text box. Click <item type="menuitem">Find</item> to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7540818" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you click <item type="menuitem">Replace All</item>, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id703451" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you click <emph>Replace</emph>, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the <emph>Search for</emph> box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click <emph>Replace</emph> to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the <emph>Replace with</emph> text box. Click <emph>Find</emph> to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7540818" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you click <emph>Replace All</emph>, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id9908444" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">To Find Styles</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8413953" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2696920" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Find & Replace</item> to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2696920" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id896938" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">More Options</item> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id896938" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>More Options</emph> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9147007" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Check <item type="menuitem">Search for Styles</item>.<br/>The <item type="menuitem">Search for</item> text box now is a list box, where you can select any of the Paragraph Styles that are applied in the current document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id679342" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select the style to search for, then click <item type="menuitem">Find</item> or <item type="menuitem">Find All</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id679342" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select the style to search for, then click <emph>Find</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3231299" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">To Find Formats</paragraph> @@ -113,29 +113,29 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3406170" role="note" l10n="NEW">Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2448805" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Find & Replace</item> to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2448805" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4542985" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">More Options</item> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4542985" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>More Options</emph> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4679403" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> button.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4679403" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Format</emph> button.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7783745" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">Find</item> or <item type="menuitem">Find All</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7783745" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>Find</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5597094" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">More options</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9919431" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8533280" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Check the <item type="menuitem">Similarity search</item> option and optionally click the <item type="menuitem">...</item> button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.)</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4646748" role="tip" l10n="NEW">When you have enabled Asian language support under <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages</item>, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8533280" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Check the <emph>Similarity search</emph> option and optionally click the <emph>...</emph> button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.)</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4646748" role="tip" l10n="NEW">When you have enabled Asian language support under <emph>Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages</emph>, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id2489394" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">The Navigator</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9934385" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4159062" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Navigator</item> to open the Navigator window.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4159062" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Edit - Navigator</emph> to open the Navigator window.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7421796" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the <link href="text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp">Navigator</link> guide for more information.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6417432" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small <item type="menuitem">Navigation</item> window.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6417432" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small <emph>Navigation</emph> window.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4639728" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document.</paragraph> <section id="relatedtopics"> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp index a4e8444107..74836425f2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp @@ -52,24 +52,24 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154256" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="4">The page number is only displayed if the following page exists.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Footer</item> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147109" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Place the cursor in the footer and choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Other</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147109" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Place the cursor in the footer and choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Other</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147134" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">In the <item type="menuitem">Fields</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Document</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147134" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">In the <emph>Fields</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Document</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150955" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click 'Page' in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list and 'Next page' in the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150955" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click 'Page' in the <emph>Type</emph> list and 'Next page' in the <emph>Select</emph> list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150517" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Click a numbering style in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> <emph/>list.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150537" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">If you select 'Text' in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> list, only the text that you enter in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box is displayed in the field.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150537" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">If you select 'Text' in the <emph>Format</emph> list, only the text that you enter in the <emph>Value</emph> box is displayed in the field.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150727" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> to insert the field with the page number.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150727" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <emph>Insert</emph> to insert the field with the page number.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp index 47d80b2364..8c9e05f016 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id7867366" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Insert a Page Number</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150508" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="2">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Footer</item> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150508" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="2">Choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150534" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Page Number</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150534" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Page Number</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153155" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="4">If you want, you can align the page number field as you would text.</paragraph> @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155532" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click in front of the page number field, type <item type="literal">Page</item> and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type <item type="literal">of</item> and enter another space.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155554" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Page Count</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155554" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Page Count</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp index 8eabbfd362..5daa018085 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155903" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147120" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp" name="Insert - Footnote"><item type="menuitem">Insert - Footnote/Endnote</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147120" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp" name="Insert - Footnote"><emph>Insert - Footnote/Endnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150937" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">In the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ <emph/>or <item type="menuitem">Endnote</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150704" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150704" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150729" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Type the note.</paragraph> @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ </image></paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153176" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="27">You can also insert footnotes by clicking the <item type="menuitem">Insert Footnote Directly</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153176" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="27">You can also insert footnotes by clicking the <emph>Insert Footnote Directly</emph> icon on the <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> </table> @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155563" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145029" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145029" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145062" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp.</paragraph> @@ -110,13 +110,13 @@ </list> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145081" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp" name="Edit - Footnote"><item type="menuitem">Edit - Footnote/Endnote</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145081" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp" name="Edit - Footnote"><emph>Edit - Footnote/Endnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147776" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp" name="Tools - Footnotes"><item type="menuitem">Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147776" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp" name="Tools - Footnotes"><emph>Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147813" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp" name="Footnote"><item type="menuitem">Footnote</item></link> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147813" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp" name="Footnote"><emph>Footnote</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147232" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp index 7f55f912f4..6343392f59 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp @@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155603" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click in a footnote or endnote.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154251" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154251" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the <link href="text/shared/01/05030500.xhp" name="Borders"><item type="menuitem">Borders</item></link> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the <link href="text/shared/01/05030500.xhp" name="Borders"><emph>Borders</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">In the <item type="menuitem">Default</item> @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ <emph/>box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150519" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">In the <item type="menuitem">Spacing to contents</item> area, clear the <item type="menuitem">Synchronize</item> check box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150519" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">In the <emph>Spacing to contents</emph> area, clear the <emph>Synchronize</emph> check box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150709" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Enter a value in the <item type="menuitem">Top</item> @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ <emph/>boxes.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150740" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150740" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp index 66136de433..0c2c6772b7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5817743" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9169591" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1590014" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5878780" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command <item type="menuitem">File - Send - Create Master Document</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5878780" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command <emph>File - Send - Create Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> <section id="relatedtopics"> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp#globaldoc_howtos"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp index 2e79a424c5..74eb5779c0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ <list type="unordered"/> <list type="ordered" startwith="4"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153382" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Save</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153382" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154242" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -86,12 +86,12 @@ </list> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155931" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="39">To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose <item type="menuitem">Delete</item>. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155931" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="39">To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose <emph>Delete</emph>. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148677" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Text</item>. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.<comment>i81372</comment></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148677" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Text</emph>. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.<comment>i81372</comment></paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="unordered"> @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ </list> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153022" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Index</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153022" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Index</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <table id="tbl_id3154206"> @@ -113,12 +113,12 @@ </image></paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153632" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="21">To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Update</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153632" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="21">To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the <emph>Update</emph> icon.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> </table> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10C40" role="note" l10n="NEW">When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the <item type="menuitem">Format - (Object type) - Type </item>tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the <item type="menuitem">Horizontal</item> and <item type="menuitem">Vertical</item> list boxes.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10C40" role="note" l10n="NEW">When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the <emph>Format - (Object type) - Type</emph> tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the <emph>Horizontal</emph> and <emph>Vertical</emph> list boxes.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153656" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="41">To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> @@ -126,10 +126,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152760" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1".</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153876" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">In the master document, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and click the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153876" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">In the master document, choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153907" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Right-click "Heading 1" and choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153907" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Right-click "Heading 1" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147124" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the <item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item> @@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ <emph/>box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150224" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select <item type="menuitem">With Page Style</item>, and select "Right page" in the box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150224" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select <emph>With Page Style</emph>, and select "Right page" in the box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145205" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145205" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145228" role="heading" level="3" l10n="CHG" @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150315" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Export</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148580" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">In the <item type="menuitem">File format</item> list, select a text document file format and click <item type="menuitem">Export</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148580" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">In the <emph>File format</emph> list, select a text document file format and click <emph>Export</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8371227" role="note" l10n="NEW">The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use <item type="menuitem">Format - Sections</item> to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp index e5e60aa0e7..cdb65d8f5b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -49,13 +49,13 @@ oldref="38"><variable id="header_footer"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp" name="About Headers and Footers">About Headers and Footers</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154255" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="35">Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Fields">Fields</link>, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150511" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="44">The page style for the current page is displayed in the <item type="menuitem">Status Bar</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150511" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="44">The page style for the current page is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph>.</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155896" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">To add a header to a page, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header</item>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155896" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">To add a header to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Header</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147119" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">To add a footer to a page, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Footer</item>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147119" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">To add a footer to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="unordered"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp index 9e4149abb7..9bb053e039 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -61,10 +61,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150929" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Open a new text document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph> and click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150536" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> @@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ <emph/>box, select "Left Page".</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146889" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146889" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150714" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150714" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150748" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">In the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ <emph/>box, select "Right Page".</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147086" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147086" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145263" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp index 9e59443b21..133f63c71a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ oldref="23">To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155874" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Outline Numbering</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155874" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155898" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ <emph/>box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150949" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150949" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150505" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ <emph/>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147065" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and then click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147065" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147095" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="12">The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp index f2bf985956..c5e0a174d7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp @@ -47,20 +47,20 @@ <bookmark_value>hiding;text, with conditions</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>variables;for hiding text</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>mw deleted "comparisons;" and copied two entries to hidden_text_display.xhp and 2 entries to nonprintable_text.xhp</comment><comment>MW added "variables;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148856" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="hidden_text"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp" name="Hiding Text">Hiding Text</link> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148856" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="hidden_text"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp" name="Hiding Text">Hiding Text</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150103" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153409" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="19">Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5174108" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Create a Variable</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153131" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click in your document and choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Other</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153131" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click in your document and choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Other</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149640" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">Click the <item type="menuitem">Variables</item> tab and click "Set Variable" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149640" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">Click the <emph>Variables </emph>tab and click "Set Variable" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149970" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Click "General" in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149970" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Click "General" in the <emph>Format </emph>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">Type a name for the variable in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box, for example, <item type="literal">Hide</item>.</paragraph> @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149869" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Enter a value for the variable in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box, for example, <item type="literal">1</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145108" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">To hide the variable in your document, select <item type="menuitem">Invisible</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145108" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">To hide the variable in your document, select <emph>Invisible</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149585" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> @@ -82,16 +82,16 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145391" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click in the document where you want to add the text.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145409" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Other</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145409" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Other</emph> and click the <emph>Functions </emph>tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155325" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Click "Hidden Text" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155325" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Click "Hidden Text" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154404" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Enter a statement in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type="literal">Hide==1</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153371" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Type the text that you want to hide in the <item type="menuitem">Hidden text</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153371" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Type the text that you want to hide in the <emph>Hidden text </emph>box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> @@ -104,10 +104,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154853" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Other</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Other</emph> and click the <emph>Functions </emph>tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155902" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155902" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155947" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Enter a statement in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type="literal">Hide==1</item>.</paragraph> @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149991" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3793450" role="note" l10n="NEW">You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu <item type="menuitem">View - Hidden Paragraphs</item>. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3793450" role="note" l10n="NEW">You must enable this feature by removing the check mark from menu <emph>View - Hidden Paragraphs</emph>. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148675" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="38">To Hide a Section</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148697" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Select the text that you want to hide in your document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153019" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153019" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148950" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">Hide</item>, and then enter an expression in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type="literal">Hide==1</item>.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp index e8ab3ff3a4..dea4171c6b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5659962" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following:</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152777" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="7">Enable the check mark at <item type="menuitem">View - Hidden Paragraphs</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152777" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="7">Enable the check mark at <emph>View - Hidden Paragraphs</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="unordered"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp index e69e08ad40..dd24a44857 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149833" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148846" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">On the Standard bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Navigator</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148846" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">On the Standard bar, click the <emph>Navigator</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156108" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">Drag Mode</item> icon, and ensure that <item type="menuitem">Insert as Hyperlink</item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp index 3f3ff05b47..53d2801850 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ </bookmark><comment>mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp"</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id129398" role="heading" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="indenting"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp">Indenting Paragraphs</link> </variable></paragraph><comment>see i66307</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5589159" role="note" l10n="NEW">To change the measurement units, choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General</item>, and then select a new measurement unit in the <item type="menuitem">Settings</item> area. </paragraph> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5589159" role="note" l10n="NEW">To change the measurement units, choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General</item>, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9936216" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7953123" role="tip" l10n="NEW">You can also <link href="text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp" name="ruler">set indents using the ruler</link>. To display the ruler, choose <item type="menuitem">View - Ruler</item>.</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp index 413b32626b..dccb8d8ebb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp @@ -57,11 +57,11 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155507" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155526" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Index Entry</item>, and do one of the following: </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155526" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Choose <emph>Edit - Index Entry</emph>, and do one of the following: </paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="unordered"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155893" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="15">To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the <link href="text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp" name="Edit Index Entry dialog"><item type="menuitem">Edit Index Entry</item> dialog</link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155893" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="15">To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the <link href="text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp" name="Edit Index Entry dialog"><emph>Edit Index Entry</emph> dialog</link>.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp index 28779bfc79..69d33dbf55 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="58">Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="60">You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Index/Table</item>, click <item type="menuitem">Index/Table</item> tab, and then clear the <item type="menuitem">Protected from manual changes</item> check box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="60">You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>, click <emph>Index/Table</emph> tab, and then clear the <emph>Protected from manual changes</emph> check box.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp index b8046ea518..c9c79abe09 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156380" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147409" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</item>, and do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147409" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</emph>, and do one of the following:</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="unordered"/> @@ -64,16 +64,16 @@ oldref="13">To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150933" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Outline Numbering</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150933" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph> and click the <emph>Numbering</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150964" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Style</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150964" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150523" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">In the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150523" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">In the <emph>Level</emph> list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153730" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153730" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <emph>OK</emph>. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. </paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp index fbe9a372c3..5bbe3ae58a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -52,27 +52,27 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155855" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="38"><variable id="indices_form"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp" name="Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents">Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents</link> </variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154259" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="39">You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the <item type="menuitem">Insert Index</item> dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154259" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="39">You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the <emph>Insert Index</emph> dialog.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155888" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="44">To Apply a Different Paragraph Style to an Index Level</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Index/Table</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147135" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Click the <item type="menuitem">Styles</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147135" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Click the <emph>Styles </emph>tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150229" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click an index level in the <item type="menuitem">Levels</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150229" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click an index level in the <emph>Levels </emph>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150934" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Click the style that you want to apply in the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Style</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150934" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Click the style that you want to apply in the <emph>Paragraph Style </emph>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150960" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="56">Click the assign button <item type="menuitem"><</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150960" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="56">Click the assign button <emph><</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150516" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150516" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3146878" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" @@ -80,19 +80,19 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146890" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="50">You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150712" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Index/Table</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150712" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150738" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Click the <item type="menuitem">Entries</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150738" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148399" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="52">In the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148424" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="53">In the <item type="menuitem">Structure</item> area, click in the box in front of <item type="menuitem">E#</item>, and then click <item type="menuitem">Hyperlink</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148424" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="53">In the <emph>Structure </emph>area, click in the box in front of <emph>E#</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153171" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Click in the box behind the <item type="menuitem">E</item>, and then click <item type="menuitem">Hyperlink</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153171" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Click in the box behind the <emph>E</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147060" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="55">Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the <item type="menuitem">All</item> button to apply the formatting to all levels.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp index bd840257cc..fdf506cd97 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -53,23 +53,23 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click in your document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">On the <item type="menuitem">Index/Table</item> tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">On the <emph>Index/Table</emph> tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147114" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">If you want to use a concordance file, select <item type="menuitem">Concordance file</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> <emph/>area, click the <item type="menuitem">File</item> button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150223" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the <item type="menuitem">Entries</item> tab, and then select <item type="menuitem">Alphabetical delimiter</item>. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the <item type="menuitem">Styles</item> tab. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150223" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab, and then select <emph>Alphabetical delimiter</emph>. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the <emph>Styles</emph> tab. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150502" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Update Index/Table</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150502" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp index c4f0be7120..9b9f998be0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ oldref="63">To Store Information in the Bibliography Database</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/02250000.xhp" name="Tools - Bibliography Database"><item type="menuitem">Tools - Bibliography Database</item></link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/02250000.xhp" name="Tools - Bibliography Database"><emph>Tools - Bibliography Database</emph></link></paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155900" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Record</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155900" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <emph>Insert - Record</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147123" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="65">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> @@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150945" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="68">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150964" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry"><item type="menuitem">Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150964" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry"><emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150525" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="69">Select <item type="menuitem">From document content</item> and click <item type="menuitem">New</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150525" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="69">Select <emph>From document content</emph> and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153738" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="70">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ <emph/>box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146873" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="72">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146873" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="72">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="73">In the <item type="menuitem">Insert Bibliography Entry</item> @@ -108,19 +108,19 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148402" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="75">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148421" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="52">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148421" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="52">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="ordered" startwith="3"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153231" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="53">Select <item type="menuitem">From bibliography database</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153231" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="53">Select <emph>From bibliography database</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147059" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> <emph/>box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147085" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="76">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and then click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147085" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="76">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp index 7dabd5f62f..496e80b1c3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section</item>, select <item type="menuitem">Link</item>, click the browse button (<item type="menuitem">...</item>), and then locate and insert a named index section.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150230" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="46">Create a <link href="text/shared/01/01010001.xhp" name="master document">master document</link>, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Index and Tables - Indexes and Tables</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150230" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="46">Create a <link href="text/shared/01/01010001.xhp" name="master document">master document</link>, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose <emph>Insert - Index and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp index a9017bb9c8..6da53cdb20 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -55,16 +55,16 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150528" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</item>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp" name="Index/Table"><item type="menuitem">Index/Table</item></link> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150528" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp" name="Index/Table"><emph>Index/Table</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153746" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Select "Table of Contents" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153746" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Select "Table of Contents" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146856" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146896" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="20">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the <item type="menuitem">Additional Styles</item> @@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153161" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="22">Do one of the following:</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153183" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Right-click in the table of contents and choose <item type="menuitem">Update Index/Table</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153183" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Right-click in the table of contents and choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147066" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147066" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp index acdb8541aa..df0039fcec 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155867" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">Click the <item type="menuitem">New User-defined Index</item> button next to the <item type="menuitem">Index</item> @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150933" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Click in the document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150952" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150952" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150509" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="55">On the <item type="menuitem">Index/Table</item> tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146881" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="56">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150720" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="20">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select <item type="menuitem">Styles</item>, and then click the (<item type="menuitem">...</item>) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the <item type="menuitem">>></item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp index 20a9b5ed91..2668208465 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155914" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="2">Click in the document where you want to insert the graphic.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155864" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/04140000.xhp" name="Insert - Picture - From File"><item type="menuitem">Insert - Picture - From File</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155864" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/04140000.xhp" name="Insert - Picture - From File"><emph>Insert - Picture - From File</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156021" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click <item type="menuitem">Open</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156021" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Locate the graphic file that you want to insert, and then click <emph>Open</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="5">By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp index b4d3dda2c9..3e87f7caf0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp @@ -49,14 +49,14 @@ </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149692" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155182" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="3"><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="WIN">The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. -</caseinline></switchinline><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="UNIX">The scanner must support the SANE standard. +</caseinline></switchinline><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="UNIX">The scanner must support the SANE standard. </caseinline></switchinline></paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155915" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155864" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/04060000.xhp" name="Insert - Picture - Scan"><item type="menuitem">Insert - Picture - Scan</item></link>, and choose the scanning source from the submenu.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155864" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/04060000.xhp" name="Insert - Picture - Scan"><emph>Insert - Picture - Scan</emph></link>, and choose the scanning source from the submenu.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Follow the scanning instructions.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp index 5c8cead4fc..079f9dfdf4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ oldref="30"><variable id="jump2statusbar"><link href="text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp" name="Going to Specific Bookmark">Going to Specific Bookmark</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155178" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="31">To go to a specific bookmark in your document, <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">hold down Ctrl and click -</caseinline><defaultinline>right-click</defaultinline></switchinline> in the <item type="menuitem">Page</item> field on the <item type="menuitem">Status Bar</item>, and then choose the bookmark.</paragraph> +</caseinline><defaultinline>right-click</defaultinline></switchinline> in the <emph>Page</emph> field on the <emph>Status Bar</emph>, and then choose the bookmark.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="32"><link href="text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp" name="Insert Bookmark">Insert Bookmark</link></paragraph> </body> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp index 49fccef514..9dd6ec440b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -55,14 +55,14 @@ oldref="5">To Insert Sections</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106AA" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">View - Toolbars - Insert</item> to open the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106AA" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>View - Toolbars - Insert</emph> to open the <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155870" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="6">Press F6 until the focus is on the<emph/> <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> toolbar.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149630" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">Press the right arrow key until the <item type="menuitem">Section</item> icon is selected.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149630" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Section</emph> icon is selected.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145100" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="20">Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert.</paragraph> @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ <item type="menuitem">Standard</item> toolbar.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154849" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="21">Press the right arrow key until the <item type="menuitem">Table</item> icon is selected.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154849" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="21">Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Table</emph> icon is selected.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp index c0de27ebc1..39b3aa3b2e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -52,16 +52,16 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154491" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="11">You can import styles from another document or template into the current document.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155910" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="12">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item> to open the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155910" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="12">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph> to open the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10703" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">New Style from Selection</item> icon to open the submenu.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10703" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the arrow next to the <emph>New Style from Selection</emph> icon to open the submenu.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1070B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Load styles</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1070B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Load styles</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149632" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select <item type="menuitem">Overwrite</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149632" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select <emph>Overwrite</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145098" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Do one of the following:</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp index 61fa84c798..965d1282cb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153402" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">The Navigator<emph/>displays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154247" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">To open the Navigator, press F5.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154247" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">To open the <emph>Navigator</emph>, press F5.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155878" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the Navigator window or enter the respective page number in the spin box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155878" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the <emph>Navigator</emph> window or enter the respective page number in the spin box.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp index 146f8e5189..1c737cb8d5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp @@ -60,10 +60,10 @@ <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145227" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">In the <item type="menuitem">Properties</item> area, clear the <item type="menuitem">Print</item> check box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145227" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">In the <emph>Properties</emph> area, clear the <emph>Print</emph> check box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150320" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150320" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp index 12fee7a6e9..393bce24bf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ <list type="unordered"/> <list type="ordered" startwith="6"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp index 25c64deba5..ed00103314 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -56,35 +56,35 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153410" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="6">To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149640" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Line Numbering</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149640" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149612" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Select <item type="menuitem">Show numbering</item>, and then select the options that you want.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149612" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>, and then select the options that you want.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156241" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="10">To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156264" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Line Numbering</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156264" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153385" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Select <item type="menuitem">Show numbering</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153385" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Press F11 to open the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window, and then click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154853" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154853" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150222" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150931" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150931" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Click the <emph>Numbering</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150956" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">In the <item type="menuitem">Line Numbering</item> @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ <emph/>check box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150520" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150520" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151077" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers.</paragraph> @@ -102,10 +102,10 @@ <emph/>tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153733" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">Select <item type="menuitem">Include this paragraph in line numbering</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153733" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">Select <emph>Include this paragraph in line numbering</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153758" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153758" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146864" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to.</paragraph> @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ <emph/>box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153804" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153804" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp index 6949f80682..39b7834ffa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149637" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="numbering_paras"><link href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp" name="Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List">Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145092" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2172612" role="tip" l10n="NEW">If you want numbered headings, use the <item type="menuitem">Tools - Outline Numbering</item> menu command to assign a numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2172612" role="tip" l10n="NEW">If you want numbered headings, use the <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph> menu command to assign a numbering to a paragraph style. Do not use the Numbering icon on the Formatting toolbar.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145107" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in a Numbered List</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> @@ -69,14 +69,14 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155877" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click anywhere in the numbered list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155895" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="21">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155895" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="21">Choose <emph>Format - Bullets and Numbering</emph>, and then click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148691" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Enter the number you want the list to start with in the <item type="menuitem">Start </item> <item type="menuitem">at</item> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147116" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147116" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp index a5fb09b70c..c59472b6d9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ oldref="10">To Delete a Manual Page Break That Occurs Before a Table</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145111" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Right-click in the table, and choose <item type="menuitem">Table</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145111" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Right-click in the table, and choose <emph>Table</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156254" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp" name="Text Flow"><item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item></link> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156254" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp" name="Text Flow"><emph>Text Flow</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153380" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Clear the <item type="menuitem">Break</item> check box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153380" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Clear the <emph>Break</emph> check box.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp index 46828f209e..0cd0eb9882 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -53,31 +53,31 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10820" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Background</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10827" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10827" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1082F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1082F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10837" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <item type="menuitem">New</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10837" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1083F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">On the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1083F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1084B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1084B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="unordered"/> <list type="ordered" startwith="6"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1085F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <item type="menuitem">Background</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1085F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Background</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10867" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1086B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1086B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> </section> @@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1087E" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10892" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10892" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1089A" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1089A" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108A2" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply.</paragraph> @@ -101,10 +101,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108BD" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108C1" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108C1" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108C9" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select <item type="menuitem">Page break</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108C9" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108D1" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ <list type="unordered"/> <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108E8" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108E8" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108E2" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp index 9e9c78c676..4d3e9ae9e5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp @@ -53,8 +53,8 @@ </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1617175" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6091494" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Insert Page Numbers</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8611102" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Page Number</item> to insert a page number at the current cursor position.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6604510" role="tip" l10n="NEW">If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose <item type="menuitem">View - Field names</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8611102" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Page Number</emph> to insert a page number at the current cursor position.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6604510" role="tip" l10n="NEW">If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose <emph>View - Field names</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2678914" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id614642" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header - (name of page style)</item> or <item type="menuitem">Insert - Footer - (name of page style)</item> to add a header or footer to all pages with the current page style.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id2551652" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Start With a Defined Page Number</paragraph> @@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5757621" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click into the first paragraph of your document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2632831" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph - Text flow</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2632831" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Paragraph - Text flow</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4395275" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the Breaks area, enable <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>. Enable <item type="menuitem">With Page Style</item> just to be able to set the new <item type="menuitem">Page number</item>. Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4395275" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the Breaks area, enable <emph>Insert</emph>. Enable <emph>With Page Style</emph> just to be able to set the new <emph>Page number</emph>. Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1654408" role="note" l10n="NEW">The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page.</paragraph> @@ -75,10 +75,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9029206" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3032319" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the <item type="menuitem">Edit Fields</item> dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3032319" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the <emph>Edit Fields</emph> dialog.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9139378" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select a number format and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9139378" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select a number format and click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5051728" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">Using Different Page Number Styles</paragraph> @@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id291451" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">A <emph>manually inserted page break</emph> can be applied without or with a change of page styles.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3341776" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If you just press Ctrl+Enter, you apply a page break without a change of styles.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5947141" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If you choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual break</item>, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3341776" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If you just press <item type="keycode">Ctrl+Enter</item>, you apply a page break without a change of styles.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5947141" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If you choose <emph>Insert - Manual break</emph>, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1911679" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method:</paragraph> @@ -103,10 +103,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4473403" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click into the first page of your document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4313791" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4313791" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4331797" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">Styles and Formatting</item> window, click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4331797" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window, click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4191717" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Double-click the "First Page" style.</paragraph> @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7588732" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id95828" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item>. You see the <item type="menuitem">Insert Break</item> dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id95828" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>. You see the <emph>Insert Break</emph> dialog.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3496200" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp index f5df3c65b1..00a59a324a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -61,16 +61,16 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6307260" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly:</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5256508" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5256508" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9681997" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9681997" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7994323" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Under <item type="menuitem">Paper format</item>, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7069002" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7069002" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id4202398" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Orientation Only for Some Pages</paragraph> @@ -80,54 +80,54 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2962126" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG">To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style:</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10727" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10727" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10741" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10741" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10749" role="listitem" l10n="CHG">Right-click a page style and choose <item type="menuitem">New</item>. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10749" role="listitem" l10n="CHG">Right-click a page style and choose <emph>New</emph>. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10751" role="listitem" l10n="CHG">On the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box, for example "My Landscape".</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10751" role="listitem" l10n="CHG">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box, for example "My Landscape".</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1075D" role="listitem" l10n="CHG">In the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1075D" role="listitem" l10n="CHG">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10775" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10775" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1077D" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Under <item type="menuitem">Paper format</item>, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108AE" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108AE" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1658375" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the <item type="menuitem">Styles and Formatting</item> window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1658375" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed.</paragraph> <section id="scope"> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6082949" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">The Scope of Page Styles</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2858668" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style?</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3278603" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">One Page Long Styles</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5169225" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the <item type="menuitem">Format - Page - Organizer</item> tab page.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6670125" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2118594" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press Ctrl+Enter or choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item> and just click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2118594" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press <item type="keycode">Ctrl+Enter</item> or choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item> and just click OK.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id166020" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">Manually Defined Range of a Page style</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6386913" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">The “Default” page style does not set a different "next style" on the <item type="menuitem">Format - Page - Organizer</item> tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6062196" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6054261" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Perform any one of the following commands:</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1811578" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item>, select a <item type="menuitem">Style</item> name from the listbox, and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1811578" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item>, select a <emph>Style</emph> name from the listbox, and click OK.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9935911" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph - Text Flow</item>. In the Breaks area, activate <item type="menuitem">Enable</item> and <item type="menuitem">With Page Style</item>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9935911" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph - Text Flow</item>. In the Breaks area, activate <emph>Enable</emph> and <emph>With Page Style</emph>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4753868" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Paragraph Style</item> from the context menu. Click the <item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item> tab. In the Breaks area, activate <item type="menuitem">Enable</item> and <item type="menuitem">With Page Style</item>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4753868" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Paragraph Style</item> from the context menu. Click the <emph>Text Flow</emph> tab. In the Breaks area, activate <emph>Enable</emph> and <emph>With Page Style</emph>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4744407" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>. Click the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Styles</item> icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>. Click the <item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item> tab. In the Breaks area, activate <item type="menuitem">Enable</item> and <item type="menuitem">With Page Style</item>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4744407" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>. Click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose <emph>Modify</emph>. Click the <emph>Text Flow</emph> tab. In the Breaks area, activate <emph>Enable</emph> and <emph>With Page Style</emph>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> </section> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp index 94349ac66c..017d521c83 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ <bookmark_value>defining;page styles</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>styles;for pages</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>MW deleted "applying;" and added "styles;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155182" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and Applying Page Styles">Creating and Applying Page Styles</link> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155182" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and Applying Page Styles">Creating and Applying Page Styles</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149846" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="10">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1071A" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> @@ -63,13 +63,13 @@ </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153133" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="12">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153133" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="12">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149641" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="13">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <item type="menuitem">New</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149641" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="13">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab, type a name in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab, type a name in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Do one of the following:</paragraph> @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ <list type="unordered"/> <list type="ordered" startwith="6"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154851" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -102,17 +102,17 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147122" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Click in the document where you want a new page to start.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150210" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150210" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150235" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Select <item type="menuitem">Page break</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150235" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150939" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> <emph/>box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150965" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150965" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp index a58703a79c..74f13d4b40 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp @@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1061A" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">To Print a Brochure</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10621" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Print</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10621" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106B6" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">Print</item> dialog, click <item type="menuitem">Properties</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106B6" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Print</emph> dialog, click <emph>Properties</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1070E" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape.</paragraph> @@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8947416" role="tip" l10n="NEW">If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog.</paragraph> <list type="ordered" startwith="4"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10628" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Return to <item type="menuitem">Print</item> dialog, and click <item type="menuitem">Options</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10628" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Return to <emph>Print</emph> dialog, and click <emph>Options</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1062C" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">Pages</item> area of the <item type="menuitem">Printer Options</item> dialog, select <item type="menuitem">Brochure</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1062C" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Pages</emph> area of the <emph>Printer Options</emph> dialog, select <emph>Brochure</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10740" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify to print right pages and left pages.</paragraph> @@ -75,10 +75,10 @@ </list> <list type="ordered" startwith="7"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10630" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">Print</item> dialog, click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10630" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Print</emph> dialog, click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp#brochure"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106EA" role="note" l10n="NEW">If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the <item type="menuitem">Printer Options</item> dialog, select <item type="menuitem">Reversed</item>, and then print the document again.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106EA" role="note" l10n="NEW">If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, open the <emph>Printer Options</emph> dialog, select <emph>Reversed</emph>, and then print the document again.</paragraph> </body> </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp index 91e21cec45..034d3f3b01 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ </variable></paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149847" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Page Preview</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149847" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Choose <emph>File</emph> - <emph>Page Preview</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155055" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Use the zoom icons on the <item type="menuitem">Page Preview</item> bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1067F" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To print your document scaled down, print the zoomed preview. Click <item type="menuitem">Print options page view</item> icon to set the print options.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155055" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Use the zoom icons on the <emph>Page Preview</emph> bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1067F" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To print your document scaled down, print the zoomed preview. Click <emph>Print options page view</emph> icon to set the print options.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145093" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the <item type="menuitem">Page Preview</item> bar to scroll through the document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145093" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the <emph>Page Preview</emph> bar to scroll through the document.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp index 70ff3b30d3..391a4eae6d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp @@ -48,12 +48,12 @@ <bookmark_value>reduced printing of multiple pages</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment> MW changed "overviews;"</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149694" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="17"><variable id="print_small"><link href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp" name="Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet">Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet</link> + oldref="17"><variable id="print_small"><link href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp" name="Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet">Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149829" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="16">In Page Preview mode, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156098" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Page Preview</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156098" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Choose <emph>File - Page Preview</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155055" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Do one of the following:</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp index af8605de3b..edbd8edd73 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp @@ -49,21 +49,21 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149841" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149841" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156108" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> <emph/>icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155066" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155066" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">In the <item type="menuitem">Paper tray</item> <emph/>box, select the paper tray that you want to use.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153140" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153140" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149649" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp index 083a6792e3..7d765fbc7f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp @@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ </variable></paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155854" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Print</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155854" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149836" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Click <item type="menuitem">Options</item> button.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149836" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Click <emph>Options</emph> button.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156106" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">In the <item type="menuitem">Pages</item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp index 32219dbddf..3eca2b98c1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ <bookmark_value>protecting;tables and sections</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>cells;protecting/unprotecting</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>mw transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/protection.xhp, then changed "sections;" and "tables;", then added 3 new entries</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6007263" role="heading" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="protection"><link href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp" name="Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer">Protecting Content in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME Writer</item></link> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6007263" role="heading" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="protection"><link href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp" name="Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer">Protecting Content in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME Writer</item></link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1924802" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer from being modified, deleted or viewed.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150114" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3166413" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="31">Turning on protection</paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3144764" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="32">Select the text. Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section - Section</item>, then under <item type="menuitem">Write protection</item> mark the <item type="menuitem">Protect</item> and <item type="menuitem">With password</item> check boxes. (If the section already exists: <item type="menuitem">Format - Sections</item>.) Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3144764" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="32">Select the text. Choose <emph>Insert - Section - Section</emph>, then under <emph>Write protection</emph> mark the <emph>Protect</emph> and <emph>With password</emph> check boxes. (If the section already exists: <emph>Format - Sections</emph>.) Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> <tablerow> @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147497" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="33">Turning off protection</paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147173" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="34">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Sections - Section</item> and under <item type="menuitem">Write protection</item> clear the <item type="menuitem">Protect</item> check box. Enter the correct password.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147173" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="34">Choose <emph>Format - Sections - Section</emph> and under <emph>Write protection</emph> clear the <emph>Protect</emph> check box. Enter the correct password.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> </table> @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154360" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="37">Turning on protection</paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145643" role="tablecontent" l10n="CHG" oldref="38">Place the cursor in a cell or select cells. Right-click to open the context menu, then choose <item type="menuitem">Cell - Protect</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145643" role="tablecontent" l10n="CHG" oldref="38">Place the cursor in a cell or select cells. Right-click to open the context menu, then choose <emph>Cell - Protect</emph>.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> <tablerow> @@ -93,8 +93,8 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150042" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="39">Turning off protection</paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155178" role="tablecontent" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells. First, if necessary, choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</item> and mark <item type="menuitem">Cursor in protected areas - Enable</item>. Then right-click the cell to open the context menu, choose <item type="menuitem">Cell - Unprotect</item>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151189" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="41">Select the table in the Navigator, open the context menu and select <item type="menuitem">Table - Unprotect</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155178" role="tablecontent" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells. First, if necessary, choose <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</emph> and mark <emph>Cursor in protected areas - Enable</emph>. Then right-click the cell to open the context menu, choose <emph>Cell - Unprotect</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151189" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="41">Select the table in the Navigator, open the context menu and select <emph>Table - Unprotect</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147322" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="42">Use Shift+Ctrl+T to remove protection for the entire current table or all selected tables.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ </tablecell> <tablecell> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153786" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="46">Place the cursor in the index/table of contents.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159088" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="47">From the context menu choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Index/Table</item>. On the <item type="menuitem">Index/Table</item> tab page, mark <item type="menuitem">Protected against manual changes</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159088" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="47">From the context menu choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>. On the Index/Table tab page, mark <emph>Protected against manual changes</emph>.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> <tablerow> @@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154118" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="48">Turning off protection</paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148463" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="49">Place the cursor in the index. First of all, if necessary, under <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</item> , mark <item type="menuitem">Cursor in protected areas - Enable</item>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152968" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="50">From the context menu choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Index/Table</item>. On the <item type="menuitem">Index/Table</item> tab page, unmark <item type="menuitem">Protected against manual changes</item>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152774" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="51">In the Navigator, select the index, then open the context menu in the Navigator and select <item type="menuitem">Index - Read-only</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148463" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="49">Place the cursor in the index. First of all, if necessary, under <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids </emph>, mark <emph>Cursor in protected areas - Enable</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152968" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="50">From the context menu choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>. On the Index/Table tab page, unmark <emph>Protected against manual changes</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152774" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="51">In the Navigator, select the index, then open the context menu in the Navigator and select <emph>Index - Read-only</emph>.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> </table> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp index 6d87b6197b..75ffbd20e5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp @@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153408" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153125" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Cross-reference</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153125" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149634" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list, select “Set Reference”.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Type a name for the target in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box. The selected text is displayed in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Type a name for the target in the <emph>Name</emph> box. The selected text is displayed in the <emph>Value</emph> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>. The name of the target is added to the <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> @@ -87,54 +87,54 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7032074" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7796868" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Cross-reference</item> to open the dialog, if it is not open already.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7796868" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph> to open the dialog, if it is not open already.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153392" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list, select "Insert Reference".</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153392" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select "Insert Reference".</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154256" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">In the <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> list, select the target that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154256" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the target that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154856" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="48">In the <item type="menuitem">Insert reference to </item>list, select the format for the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154856" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="48">In the <emph>Insert reference to</emph> list, select the format for the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155895" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155895" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148685" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Click <item type="menuitem">Close</item> when finished.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148685" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149980" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="29">Cross-Referencing an Object</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149992" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="30">You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose <link href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp" name="Insert - Caption"><item type="menuitem">Insert - Caption</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149992" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="30">You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose <link href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp" name="Insert - Caption"><emph>Insert - Caption</emph></link>.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147123" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150212" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Cross-reference</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150212" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150236" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list, select the caption category of the object.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150236" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select the caption category of the object.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150942" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150942" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150968" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="34">In the <item type="menuitem">Insert reference to</item> list, select the format of the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150968" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="34">In the <emph>Insert reference to</emph> list, select the format of the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150535" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150535" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151092" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="55">Click <item type="menuitem">Close</item> when finished.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151092" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="55">Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151115" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="56">Updating Cross-References</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153594" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="51">To manually update the cross-references in a document, press F9.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7321390" role="tip" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">View - Fields</item> to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7321390" role="tip" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>View - Fields</emph> to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp#references_modify"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp index 1ed3615ec5..13ddae4f7c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp @@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ <list type="ordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153132" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="2">Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149632" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose <item type="menuitem">View - Field Shadings</item> or press Ctrl+F8.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149632" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose <emph>View - Field Shadings</emph> or press <emph>Ctrl+F8</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Fields</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Set the options that you want, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Set the options that you want, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154255" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="5">Use the arrow buttons in the <item type="menuitem">Edit Fields</item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp index 8dee7a4e7e..e7a19601ac 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10665" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select the whole document.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10669" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page - Page</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10669" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Page - Page</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10671" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select the <item type="menuitem">Register-true</item> checkbox and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> @@ -69,11 +69,11 @@ <list type="ordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10682" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Do one of the following:</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10685" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing</item>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1068C" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>. In the dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Indents & Spacing</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10685" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose <emph>Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1068C" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose <emph>Modify</emph>. In the dialog, click the <emph>Indents & Spacing</emph> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10698" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Clear the <item type="menuitem">Register-true</item> checkbox.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10698" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Clear the <emph>Register-true</emph> checkbox.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp index 88827e2f26..9b41f96748 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -59,10 +59,10 @@ </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149645" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">On the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab, ensure that <item type="menuitem">Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50%</item> is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149645" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">On the <emph>Options</emph> tab, ensure that <emph>Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50%</emph> is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145093" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145093" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145118" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove.</paragraph> @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ <emph/>box on the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> bar, choose “Default”.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153388" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - AutoCorrect - Apply</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153388" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Format - AutoCorrect - Apply</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp index 89772e7bac..ee1dbff6df 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154091" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing the right-arrow key. For example, if you have pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press the right arrow to return to the default character format of the paragraph.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155854" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="28">To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command <item type="menuitem">Format - Default Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155854" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="28">To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command <emph>Format - Default Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp index 00b7d7adc4..e607ffbe44 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ </bookmark><comment>mw made "indent settings..." a two level entry and cut "changing;indents"</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1065F" role="heading" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="ruler"><link href="text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp">Using Rulers</link> </variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1067D" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">To show or hide rulers, choose <item type="menuitem">View - Ruler</item>. To show the vertical ruler, choose <link href="text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp" name="Tools - Options - Writer - View"><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View</item></link>, and then select <item type="menuitem">Vertical ruler</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Ruler</item> area.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1067D" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">To show or hide rulers, choose <emph>View - Ruler</emph>. To show the vertical ruler, choose <link href="text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp" name="Tools - Options - Writer - View"><emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View</emph></link>, and then select <emph>Vertical ruler</emph> in the <emph>Ruler</emph> area.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149686" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="20">Adjusting Page Margins</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155175" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="3">The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers.</paragraph> @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145769" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149164" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="12">You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the <link href="text/shared/01/05030000.xhp" name="Paragraph"><item type="menuitem">Paragraph</item></link> dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149164" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="12">You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the <link href="text/shared/01/05030000.xhp" name="Paragraph"><emph>Paragraph</emph></link> dialog.</paragraph> <section id="relatedtopics"> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/> <embed href="text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp#tabs"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp index d066989d41..5d1d14e71c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -35,60 +35,63 @@ <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidesearch_regexpxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Wildcards in Text Searches</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> +<topic id="textswriterguidesearch_regexpxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Wildcards in Text Searches</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp</filename> +</topic> +</meta> +<body> <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150099"><bookmark_value>wildcards, see regular expressions</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>searching; with wildcards</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>regular expressions;searching</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>examples for regular expressions</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>searching; with wildcards</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>regular expressions;searching</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>examples for regular expressions</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>characters;finding all</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>invisible characters;finding</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>mw deleted "wildcards;" and inserted wildcards crossreference</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150099" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="15"><variable id="search_regexp"><link href="text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp">Using Wildcards in Text Searches</link> +oldref="15"><variable id="search_regexp"><link href="text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp">Using Wildcards in Text Searches</link> </variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155182" role="paragraph" oldref="50">You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son".</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155907" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Find & Replace</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2142399" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">More Options</item> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155861" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Select the <item type="menuitem">Regular expressions</item> check box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149843" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">In the <item type="menuitem">Search for</item> - <emph/>box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156113" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">Click <item type="menuitem">Find</item> - <emph/>or<emph/> - <item type="menuitem">Find All</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153401" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="52">Regular Expression Examples</paragraph> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149641" role="listitem" oldref="44">The wildcard for a single character is a period (.).</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153136" role="listitem" oldref="43">The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233".</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149609" role="listitem" oldref="45">The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*).</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149854" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="46">The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.).</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153414" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="49">You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph.</paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149875" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="48"><link href="text/shared/01/02100001.xhp" name="List of Wildcards">List of Wildcards</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0509200916345516" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Wildcards or placeholders can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters.</paragraph> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155182" role="paragraph" oldref="50">You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son".</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155907" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Find & Replace</item>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2142399" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <item type="menuitem">More Options</item> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155861" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Select the <item type="menuitem">Regular expressions</item> check box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149843" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">In the <item type="menuitem">Search for</item> box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156113" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">Click <item type="menuitem">Find</item> or <item type="menuitem">Find All</item>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153401" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" + oldref="52">Regular Expression Examples</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149641" role="listitem" oldref="44">The wildcard for a single character is a period (.).</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153136" role="listitem" oldref="43">The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149609" role="listitem" oldref="45">The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*).</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149854" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="46">The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.).</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0509200916345545" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">The wildcard for a tab character is \t.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153414" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="49">You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph.</paragraph> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149875" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="48"><link href="text/shared/01/02100001.xhp" name="List of Wildcards">List of Wildcards</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp index 0b475a1fac..2b9b0f9786 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp @@ -49,12 +49,12 @@ <bookmark_value>hiding;sections</bookmark_value> </bookmark> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149816" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="13"><variable id="section_edit"><link href="text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp" name="Editing Sections">Editing Sections</link> + oldref="13"><variable id="section_edit"><link href="text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp" name="Editing Sections">Editing Sections</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="14">You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154224" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp" name="Format - Sections"><item type="menuitem">Format - Sections</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154224" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp" name="Format - Sections"><emph>Format - Sections</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149848" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="16">In the <item type="menuitem">Section</item> @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ <list type="unordered"/> <list type="ordered" startwith="4"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149874" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">Set the other options that you want, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149874" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">Set the other options that you want, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp index 1f4423d840..d4e9ab7859 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp @@ -59,27 +59,27 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156103" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153404" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">In the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> <emph/>box, type a name for the section.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153127" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Set the options for the section, and then click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153127" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Set the options for the section, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149635" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="30">To Insert a Section as a Link</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149648" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="31">Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="18">When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose<item type="menuitem"> Tools - Update - Links</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="18">When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Links</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149860" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="22">You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145104" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153363" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">In the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> @@ -96,14 +96,14 @@ <emph/>box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155882" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155882" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149978" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">In the <item type="menuitem">Section</item> <emph/>box, select the section that you want to insert.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150003" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150003" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp index e26d831411..96ebf8aab3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp @@ -55,14 +55,14 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156100" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Send - Create HTML Document</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156100" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <emph>File - Send - Create HTML Document</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">In the <item type="menuitem">Styles</item> <emph/>box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153407" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click <item type="menuitem">Save</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153407" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> </body> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp index 09835ec8aa..6221aaf545 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2508621" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following:</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3856013" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Save the *.oxt extension file to your hard drive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Extension Manager</item> to open the Extension Manager, click <item type="menuitem">Add</item> and browse to the file.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3856013" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Extension Manager</item> to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7814264" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG">Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser.</paragraph> @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id8142338" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">Smart Tags Menu</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1917477" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance</item>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id192266" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to Ctrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1998962" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The <item type="menuitem">Smart Tags Options</item> command opens the <link href="text/shared/01/06040700.xhp">Smart Tags</link> page of <item type="menuitem">Tools - Autocorrect Options</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1998962" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The <item type="menuitem">Smart Tags Options</item> command opens the <link href="text/shared/01/06040700.xhp">Smart Tags</link> page of Tools - Autocorrect Options.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id2376476" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Enable and Disable Smart Tags</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id349131" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the <link href="text/shared/01/06040700.xhp">Smart Tags</link> page in <item type="menuitem">Tools - Autocorrect Options</item>. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1216467" role="note" l10n="NEW">Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp index 3df8959043..125ac74d13 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155859" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149836" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="44">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Spelling and Grammar</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149836" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Spelling and Grammar</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156104" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="45">When a possible spelling error is encountered, the <item type="menuitem">Spellcheck</item> @@ -64,9 +64,9 @@ </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149861" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Do one of the following:</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145099" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="47">To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click <item type="menuitem">Change</item>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="48">Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click <item type="menuitem">Change</item>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click <item type="menuitem">Add</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145099" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="47">To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click <emph>Change</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="48">Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click <emph>Change</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click <emph>Add</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp index ee02470759..962785a2ac 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155855" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="42">You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156114" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="32">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156114" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="32">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153128" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="33">Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply.</paragraph> @@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153371" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154263" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Press Esc when finished.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154263" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Press <item type="keycode">Esc</item> when finished.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2227852" role="paragraph" localize="false"> - <embedvar href="text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp#formatpaintbrush"/> - </paragraph> +<embedvar href="text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp#formatpaintbrush"/> +</paragraph> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#stylist_fromselect"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp#stylist_update"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp index a82b917155..4ae74a254f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ oldref="35">To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156097" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="36">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156097" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="36">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153402" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="42">Click the icon of the style category that you want to create.</paragraph> @@ -69,14 +69,14 @@ <emph/>box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154411" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154411" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153373" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="20">To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="31">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="31">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154258" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the icon of the style category that you want to create.</paragraph> @@ -85,11 +85,11 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154851" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Select at least one character, or object, in the style that you want to copy. For page and frame styles, select at least one character or object in the page or frame.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154871" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="33">Drag the character or object to the <item type="menuitem">Styles and Formatting</item> window and release.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154871" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="33">Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107B2" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">For paragraph and character styles, you can drag-and-drop onto the respective icon in the Styles and Formatting window. You do not need to open that style category in advance.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107B5" role="note" l10n="NEW">You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the <item type="menuitem">Styles and Formatting</item> window and drop the frame onto the <item type="menuitem">Frame Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107B5" role="note" l10n="NEW">You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon.</paragraph> <section id="relatedtopics"> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp index 5086c0c7ed..498da189cf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5708792" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select the adjacent cells.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6301461" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Merge Cells</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6301461" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Table - Merge Cells</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id9156468" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Split Cells</paragraph> @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3415936" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Place the cursor in the cell to be split.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4044312" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Split Cells</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4044312" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Table - Split Cells</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id634174" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp index 82b4f0bdce..b6d287ba9b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155918" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table.</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155863" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="5">To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Delete - Table</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155863" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="5">To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose <emph>Table - Delete - Table</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153415" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="6">To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp index 9049df3bf6..bc30c97f2f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -60,13 +60,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155861" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147416" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="28">On the <item type="menuitem">Standard</item> bar, click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">Table</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147416" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="28">On the <emph>Standard</emph> bar, click the arrow next to the <emph>Table</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153398" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="30">To cancel, drag to the other side until <item type="menuitem">Cancel</item> appears in the preview area of the grid.<comment>make it RTL compliant</comment></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="30">To cancel, drag to the other side until <emph>Cancel</emph> appears in the preview area of the grid.<comment>make it RTL compliant</comment></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153135" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="35">To Insert a Table With a Menu Command</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> @@ -74,13 +74,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149642" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149609" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="37">Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Insert - Table</item>. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149609" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="37">Choose <emph>Table - Insert - Table</emph>. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149858" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="66">In the <item type="menuitem">Size</item> area, enter the number of rows and columns.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149858" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="66">In the <emph>Size</emph> area, enter the number of rows and columns.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145097" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="67">Select the options that you want, click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145097" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="67">Select the options that you want, click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149572" role="heading" level="2" l10n="CHG" @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156250" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154395" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="68">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Copy</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154395" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="68">Choose <emph>Edit - Copy</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154420" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">In your text document, do one of the following:</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp index 21a575ecc9..8aae55f216 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149636" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="7">You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145098" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Insert - Table</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145098" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">Choose <emph>Table - Insert - Table</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">Select the <item type="menuitem">Heading</item> @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153376" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Select the number of rows and columns for the table.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153393" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153393" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp index 655f06effa..79076a622f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp @@ -81,26 +81,26 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145390" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line on the ruler until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0918200811260957" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0918200811260957" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> and then click and drag a line to scale all cells right or above the line proportionally.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145411" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145411" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option </caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline> key, and then press the left or the right arrow key.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153364" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153364" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option </caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Shift, and then press the right arrow key.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155891" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="29">You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</item>, and selecting the options that you want in the <item type="menuitem">Keyboard handling</item> area.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155891" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="29">You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</emph>, and selecting the options that you want in the <emph>Keyboard handling</emph> area.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149993" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="30">To Change the Width of a Cell</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148676" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option+Command + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148676" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option+Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Alt+Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>, and then press the left or the right arrow key</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153014" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="32">Changing the Height of a Row</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153035" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153035" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option </caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline> key, and then press the up or the down arrow key.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id8478041" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">Resizing a Whole Table</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3358867" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">To change the width and height of a table, do one of the following:</paragraph> @@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1279030" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Click inside the table. Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Table Properties</item> to open a dialog and set the properties to the numbers.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5009308" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command -</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A twice to select the whole table, then choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Frame</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5009308" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A twice to select the whole table, then choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4190496" role="note" l10n="NEW">Tables within HTML pages do not offer the full range of properties and commands as tables in OpenDocument format.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp#tablemode"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp index f5deecc31e..389dd53ce1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -60,15 +60,15 @@ <list type="unordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149638" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9"> - <item type="menuitem">Fixed</item> - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant.</paragraph> +<emph>Fixed</emph> - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149613" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10"> - <item type="menuitem">Fixed, proportional</item> - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant.</paragraph> +<emph>Fixed, proportional</emph> - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149864" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11"> - <item type="menuitem">Variable</item> - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases.</paragraph> +<emph>Variable</emph> - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp index 94246db9b5..1be6ca96ec 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155915" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="64">Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147422" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="65">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Templates - Save</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147422" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="65">Choose <emph>File - Templates - Save</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="66">In the <item type="menuitem">New Template</item> @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ <emph/>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="71">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="71">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153404" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="67">To create a document based on the template, choose<emph/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp index c51d656269..1d881647ae 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp @@ -56,40 +56,40 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149838" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="102">Create a document and the content and formatting styles that you want.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="113">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Templates - Save</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="113">Choose <emph>File - Templates - Save</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149283" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="106">In the <item type="menuitem">New Template</item> box, type a name for the new template.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149283" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="106">In the <emph>New Template</emph> box, type a name for the new template.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153409" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="114">In the <item type="menuitem">Categories</item> <emph/>list, select "My Templates", and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153140" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="107">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/01110100.xhp" name="File - Templates - Organize"><item type="menuitem">File - Templates - Organize</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153140" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="107">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/01110100.xhp" name="File - Templates - Organize"><emph>File - Templates - Organize</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149952" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="108">In the category list, double-click the "My Templates" folder.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149970" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="105">Right-click the template that you created, and choose <item type="menuitem">Set as Default Template</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149970" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="105">Right-click the template that you created, and choose <emph>Set as Default Template</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="115">Click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="115">Click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149867" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="109">To Reset the Default Template</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145102" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="110">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/01110100.xhp" name="File - Templates - Organize"><item type="menuitem">File - Templates - Organize</item></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145102" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="110">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/01110100.xhp" name="File - Templates - Organize"><emph>File - Templates - Organize</emph></link>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149582" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="111">Right-click a folder in the category list, choose<emph/> <item type="menuitem">Reset Default Template - Text Document</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156245" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="112">Click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156245" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="112">Click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp index 0ce7043996..2c7d59ae7d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ <emph/>box, select the animation that you want.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145786" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Set the properties of the effect, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145786" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Set the properties of the effect, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> </body> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp index df18d0a352..fc15a72f82 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155182" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="text_capital"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp" name="Changing the Case of Text">Changing the Case of Text</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155916" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10728" role="note" l10n="NEW">When you apply a formatting to your text by <item type="menuitem">Format - Character</item>, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Change Case</item>, the text is permanently changed.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10728" role="note" l10n="NEW">When you apply a formatting to your text by <emph>Format - Character</emph>, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose <emph>Format - Change Case</emph>, the text is permanently changed.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155861" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To Capitalize Text</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp index 4bc14b21b7..ab9a7082e2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155920" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="78">Select the text that you want to center on the page.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="79">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Frame</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="79">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152765" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="82">In the <item type="menuitem">Anchor</item> @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ <emph/>boxes.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="97">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="97">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149615" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="84">To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Frame/Object</item>. Click the <item type="menuitem">Borders</item> tab, and then click in the<emph/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp index 9481de122c..d0a1f89fa3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ oldref="24"><variable id="text_direct_cursor"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp" name="Using the Direct Cursor">Using the Direct Cursor</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155908" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="25">The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155921" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="41">To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155921" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="41">To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</emph>.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106A3" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">On the <item type="menuitem">Tools</item> bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Direct Cursor</item> icon diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp index 2d8ddd6187..b1d5ce54f5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp @@ -53,16 +53,16 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147412" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="67">Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as <emph>bold</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149840" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="68">Right-click in a paragraph, choose <item type="menuitem">Paragraph</item>, set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149840" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="68">Right-click in a paragraph, choose <emph>Paragraph, </emph>set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150084" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="69">Select the text, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Frame</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6924649" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG">Use the <item type="menuitem">Text</item> tool on the <item type="menuitem">Drawing</item> toolbar. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6924649" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG">Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106E7" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the <item type="menuitem">Fontwork Gallery</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Drawing</item> bar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106E7" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp index 833b7fa567..befb5894bb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149961" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="5">Select the text that you want to include in the frame.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149602" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Frame</item>, and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149602" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>, and click OK.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145115" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149578" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156239" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose <item type="menuitem">Frame</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156239" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose <emph>Frame</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156261" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="63">To resize a text frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame.</paragraph> @@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154858" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="100">Select the text frame (you see the eight handles).</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155875" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="101">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Frame/Object - Options</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155875" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="101">Choose <emph>Format - Frame/Object - Options</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155899" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="102">In the <item type="menuitem">Properties</item> area, unmark the <item type="menuitem">Print</item> check box and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155899" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="102">In the <emph>Properties</emph> area, unmark the <emph>Print</emph> check box and click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148701" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp index d79466d0d1..af5562b90e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149949" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="30">Moves the cursor up or down one line.</paragraph> </tablecell> <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149972" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="31">(<switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+Option + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149972" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="31">(<switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+Option </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl+Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>) Moves the current paragraph up or down.</paragraph> </tablecell> </tablerow> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp index 78a7202e70..09eb30e54c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="72">Drag one of the corner handles of the text object.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154844" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="73">You can also right-click the text object, choose <item type="menuitem">Position and Size</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Rotation</item> tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154844" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="73">You can also right-click the text object, choose <emph>Position and Size</emph>, click the <emph>Rotation</emph> tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object.</paragraph> <section id="relatedtopics"> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155888" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="74"><link href="text/shared/02/01140000.xhp" name="Show Draw Functions">Show Draw Functions</link></paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp index 52a4d32b88..0cb7bd94de 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp @@ -55,10 +55,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155855" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147412" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - File</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147412" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Choose <emph>Insert - File</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149839" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149839" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148858" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="32">The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link.</paragraph> @@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150096" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153404" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153404" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153127" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Type a name in the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> box, and then select the <item type="menuitem">Link</item> check box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153127" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Type a name in the <emph>New Section</emph> box, and then select the <emph>Link</emph> check box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149642" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the <item type="menuitem">File Name</item> @@ -84,10 +84,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149619" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">If you want, set the formatting options for the section.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149862" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149862" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145099" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="41">$[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Update - Update All</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145099" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="41">$[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Update All</emph>.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> </body> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp index fd1d87a730..e96843c607 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp @@ -57,17 +57,17 @@ oldref="51">To Automatically Hyphenate Text in a Paragraph</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148850" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Right-click in a paragraph, and choose <item type="menuitem">Paragraph</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148850" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Right-click in a paragraph, and choose <emph>Paragraph</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156104" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp" name="Text Flow"><item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item></link> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156104" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp" name="Text Flow"><emph>Text Flow</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">In the <item type="menuitem">Hyphenation</item> <emph/>area, select the <item type="menuitem">Automatically</item> check box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153121" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="52">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153121" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="52">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149629" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" @@ -76,20 +76,20 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149956" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="48">For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and then click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149867" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="55">Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149867" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="55">Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145106" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="56">Click the <item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item> <emph/>tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149582" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="57">In the <item type="menuitem">Hyphenation</item> area, select the <item type="menuitem">Automatically</item> check box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149582" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="57">In the <emph>Hyphenation</emph> area, select the <emph>Automatically</emph> check box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156250" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="58">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156250" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="58">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145400" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="59">Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate.</paragraph> @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="" role="heading" level="3" l10n="NEW">To Manually Hyphenate Single Words</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153363" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="24">To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Hyphen(-).</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154244" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="37">If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the <item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item> tab page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154244" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="37">If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the <emph>Text Flow</emph> tab page.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154847" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="60">To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154869" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="61">Select the text that you want to hyphenate.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="26">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Language - Hyphenation</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="26">Choose <emph>Tools - Language - Hyphenation</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="ordered" startwith="3"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp index 3652480b01..7652c55fa2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ </image>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145403" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="17">To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Bullets On/Off</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145403" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="17">To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the <emph>Bullets On/Off</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154403" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="26">To Format Bullets</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154416" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">To change the formatting of a bulleted list, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp index 24aed3fb93..d3330fb0d9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ <bookmark_value>inserting;numbering</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;"</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147418" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="15"><variable id="using_numbered_lists2"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp" name="Adding Numbering">Adding Numbering</link> + oldref="15"><variable id="using_numbered_lists2"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp" name="Adding Numbering">Adding Numbering</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id4188970" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Add Numbering to a List</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> @@ -61,13 +61,13 @@ </image>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149573" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="29">To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the <item type="menuitem">Bullets and Numbering</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149573" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="29">To change the formatting and the hierarchy of a numbered list, click in the list, and then open the <emph>Bullets and Numbering</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153365" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="25">To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering On/Off</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153365" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="25">To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, and then click the <emph>Numbering On/Off</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154233" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="30">To Format a Numbered List</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154246" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="16">To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154246" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="16">To change the formatting of a numbered list, click in the list, then choose <emph>Format - Bullets and Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> <section id="relatedtopics"> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp index 4d604e87a3..9811318db1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ <bookmark_value>paragraph styles;numbering</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>MW deleted "applying;"</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155174" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="30"><variable id="using_numbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp" name="Numbering and Numbering Styles">Numbering and Numbering Styles</link> + oldref="30"><variable id="using_numbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp" name="Numbering and Numbering Styles">Numbering and Numbering Styles</link> </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149818" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="26">You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6140629" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Apply Numbering Manually</paragraph> @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10737" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a format.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1073A" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG">You can also use the commands on the <link href="text/swriter/main0206.xhp" name="Numbering Object Bar"><item type="menuitem">Bullets and Numbering</item></link> toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the <item type="menuitem">Bullets and Numbering</item> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1073A" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG">You can also use the commands on the <link href="text/swriter/main0206.xhp" name="Numbering Object Bar">Bullets and Numbering</link> toolbar to edit a numbered or bulleted list. To change the numbering or bullet format, click the <emph>Bullets and Numbering</emph> icon.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153123" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="34">To Apply Numbering With a Paragraph Style</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153137" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="31">Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the numbering format of the style, all paragraphs using the style are automatically updated.</paragraph> @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ <emph/>icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149599" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149599" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149850" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Click the <item type="menuitem">Outline & Numbering</item> @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149874" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">In the <item type="menuitem">Numbering Style</item> box, select the type of numbering that you want to use.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145113" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145113" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149589" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp index e0d4fbde93..e3617d5430 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155920" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click in the word that you want to look up.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155867" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="39">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Language - Thesaurus</item>, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155867" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="39">Choose <emph>Tools - Language - Thesaurus</emph>, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command </caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+F7.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ <emph/>list.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149644" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149644" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145113" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="18">To look up the word in a different language, click <item type="menuitem">Language</item> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp index df829b50a3..c56698ce8c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107A5" role="listitem" l10n="NEW"> Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion</item>. </paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107AD" role="listitem" l10n="NEW"> Clear <item type="menuitem">Enable word completion</item>. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107AD" role="listitem" l10n="NEW"> Clear <emph>Enable word completion</emph> . </paragraph> </listitem> </list> <section id="relatedtopics"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp index efa0e97417..61b47f8df9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp @@ -48,19 +48,19 @@ <bookmark_value>weekdays; automatically completing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>months; automatically completing</bookmark_value> </bookmark><comment>mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id4745017" role="heading" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="word_completion_adjust"><link href="text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp">Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents</link> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id4745017" role="heading" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="word_completion_adjust"><link href="text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp">Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents</link> </variable></paragraph><comment>MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp</comment> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4814294" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2593462" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">To fine-tune the word completion choose <item type="menuitem">Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion</item> and select any of the following options: </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107C6" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW"> To Insert an Additional Space Character </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B03" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Select <item type="menuitem">Append space</item>. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B03" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Select <emph>Append space</emph>. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B0E" role="note" l10n="NEW"> The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107CC" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW"> To Define the Accept Key </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B20" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the <item type="menuitem">Accept with</item> list box. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B20" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the <emph>Accept with</emph> list box. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D2" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW"> To Select the Minimum Number of Characters </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B36" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Use the <item type="menuitem">Min. word length</item> box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B36" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Use the <emph>Min. word length</emph> box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D8" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW"> To Select the Scope of Collected Words </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B4C" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Select <item type="menuitem">When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents</item>. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B4C" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Select <emph>When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents</emph>. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B53" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B56" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"> If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. </paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2634968" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section.</paragraph> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp index a99997f2f5..2ccd09e0a6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106D1" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149821" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="5">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Word Count</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149821" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Tools - Word Count</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106E2" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To get some more statistics about the document, choose <item type="menuitem">File - Properties - Statistics</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106E2" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To get some more statistics about the document, choose <emph>File - Properties - Statistics</emph>.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147418" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="4"><link href="text/shared/01/01100400.xhp" name="File - Properties - Statistics">File - Properties - Statistics</link></paragraph> </body> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp index b09bf35860..9504d77fc7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149696" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Select the object.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155907" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Wrap</item>, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155907" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Choose <emph>Format - Wrap</emph>, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155859" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154079" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Select the object.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Graphics</item>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><item type="menuitem">Wrap</item></link> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Choose <emph>Format - Graphics</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="ordered" startwith="3"> @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153370" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Set the options that you want.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153386" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153386" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154247" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154262" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="18">You can change the shape that the text wraps around.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154860" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Wrap - Edit Contour</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154860" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose <emph>Wrap - Edit Contour</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> </list> <list type="ordered" startwith="2"> |